LG F1200 User Manual Download Page 15

Page: 15 / 288

200

ﻡﺪﺨﺘﺴﻣ

ﻞﻴﻟﺩ

ﻒﺗﺎﻬﻟﺍ

ﺢﺘﻓ

ﺮﻈﻨﻣ

ﻥﺫﻷﺍ

ﺔﻋﺎﻤﺳ

ﺔﻴﺴﻴﺋﺮﻟﺍ

ﺔﺷﺎﺸﻟﺍ

ﻝﺎﺳﺭﺇ

ﺡﺎﺘﻔﻣ

ﺮﺴﻳﻷﺍ

ﺭﺎﻴﺘﺧﻻﺍ

ﺡﺎﺘﻔﻣ

ﻰﻘﻴﺳﻮﻤﻟﺍ

ﺭﺎﺼﺘﺧﺍ

ﺡﺎﺘﻔﻣ

ﻦﻤﻳﻷﺍ

ﺭﺎﻴﺘﺧﻻﺍ

ﺡﺎﺘﻔﻣ

ﺍﺮﻴﻣﺎﻜﻟﺍ

ﺡﺎﺘﻔﻣ

.10

ﻞﻴﻐﺸﺘﻟﺍ

ءﺎﻬﻧﻹﺍ

ﺡﺎﺘﻔﻣ

.12

ﺢﺴﻤﻟﺍ

ﺡﺎﺘﻔﻣ

.11

ﺔﺻﺎﺨﻟﺍ

ﻒﺋﺎﻇﻮﻟﺍ

ﺢﻴﺗﺎﻔﻣ

ﻥﻮﻓﻭﺮﻜﻴﻤﻟﺍ

.14

ﺔﻴﻤﻗﺮﻟﺍ

ﺔﻳﺪﺠﺑﻷﺍ

ﺢﻴﺗﺎﻔﻤﻟﺍ

.13

ﻝﺎﻘﺘﻧﻻﺍ

ﺢﻴﺗﺎﻔﻣ

ﺖﻧﺮﺘﻧﻹﺎﺑ

ﻝﺎﺼﺗﻻﺍ

ﺪﻴﻛﺄﺘﻟﺍ

ﺡﺎﺘﻔﻣ

F1200

ﺕﺍﺰﻴﻣ

Summary of Contents for F1200

Page 1: ...F1200 User Guide F1200 F1200 Some of contents in this manual may differ from your phone depending on the software of the phone or your service provider Part No MMBB0149813 1 0 ...

Page 2: ... ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﻠﻚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﺪ F1200 ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺑﻰ ...

Page 3: ...ﺟﻴﺎ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺗﻮﺻﻠﺖ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻟﻪ ﺳﻮء ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﻭﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻗﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺻﺮﺍﺣﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻟﻰ ...

Page 4: ...ﺕ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻳﺘﻢ SAR ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺣﺰﻡ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻋﻲ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ SAR ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﻔﻲ ﻣﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺇﻻ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ LG ﺍﻷﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻠﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﺠﻨﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻦ SAR ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻋﻲ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﻴﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺮﺍﻣﺎﺕ 10 ﻋﺸﺮﺓ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺟﺮﺍﻡ ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻭﺍﺕ 2 ﻣﻌﺪﻟﻪ ﻳﺒ...

Page 5: ...ﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻦ ً ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻻ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻨﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﻨﻮﻉ ﺑﻐﻄﺎء ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻐﻄﺎء ﻛﺴﻮﺗﻬﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﻼء ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺮ ﻣﺨﻔﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻻ ﻣﻔﺮﻁ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻸﺩﺧﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻻ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻼﺕ ﺗﺬ...

Page 6: ...ﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻗﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺬﻳﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻗﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻃﻠﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ً ًﺎ ﻳ ﻳﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻻ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺒﺎﻫﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻋﻂ ً ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮﺍ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﻘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺖ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻗﺒﻞ ...

Page 7: ...ﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻋﻦ ً ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﺤﻔﻆ ﻓﻜﻬﺎ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺘﻨﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺭﺉ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺃﻥ ً ﺃﺑﺪﺍ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻻ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺭﺉ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﺎﺡ ﻻ ﻗﺪ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺭﺉ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻻ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﺒﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺷﺤﻨﺔ ﺇﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﻳﻠﺰﻣﻚ ﻻ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺩﺍء ﻣﻦ ﻳﻀﻌﻒ ﺃﻥ ﺷﺄﻧﻪ ﻣﻦ ...

Page 8: ... ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻭﻻ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻻ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﻗﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﻻ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ...

Page 9: ...ﺧﺎﻝ SIM ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ 21 ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺷﺤﻦ 22 ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺻﻞ 22 ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ 23 ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ 23 ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺣﻈﺮ ﺳﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ 24 ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ 24 ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء 26 ﻧﺺ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ 29 ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ 29 ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 30 ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺗﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ 32 ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺷﺠﺮﺓ 34 ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ...

Page 11: ...ﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ 65 MMS 2 5 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ 68 3 5 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ 69 4 5 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ 70 5 5 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ 71 6 5 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ 72 6 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ 72 1 6 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ 74 2 6 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ 75 3 6 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ 76 7 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺎﺗﻲ 76 1 7 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ 77 2 7 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ 77 3 7 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ 77 4 7 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ...

Page 13: ... ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺳﻤﺎﻋﻪ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺗﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍ...

Page 14: ...ﻣﻦ ﺇﺯﻋﺎﺝ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻏﻄﺎء 1 ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ 3 ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺎ ً ﺃﻳﻀ ﺻﻮﺭ IrDA ﻣﻨﻔﺬ 4 ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻄﺎء 7 ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ 5 ﺍﻟﺤﻤﻞ ﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ 1 ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ 6 ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺎﺳﻚ ﺯﺭ 4 ﻏﻄﺎء ﻟﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ 8 ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ SIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ 3 SIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ 2 F1200 ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ...

Page 15: ...2 ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ 6 ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ 4 ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ 5 ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ 9 ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ 10 ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ 12 ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ 11 ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ 7 ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ 14 ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ 13 ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ 8 ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ 3 F1200 ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ...

Page 16: ...ﺑﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺎ ً ﺃﻳﻀ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ 8 ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ...

Page 18: ...ﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻛﻨﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻟﻠﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﻴﻮﻡ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ WAP ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ GPRS ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ...

Page 19: ...ﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﻤﻞ MP3 ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺗﺮﺟﻊ 55 ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ F1200 ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ F1200 ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻠ...

Page 20: ... ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺑﻔﻚ ﻗﻢ 1 ﺑﻔﻚ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻭﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺃﻋﻄﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻗﺪ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ 2 ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺛﻢ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ...

Page 21: ...ﻣﺲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء SIM ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍ ً ﺪ ﺟﻴ ﺍﻧﺘﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﺵ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻋﻦ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ SIM ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﺪ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ SIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ 4 ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ I ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﺃﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ SIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ SIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺪ...

Page 22: ...ﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﻢ 2 ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻗﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻣﻦ ًﺎ ﻣ ﺗﻤﺎ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻭﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻗﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﻟﻤ...

Page 23: ...ﻗﻢ 1 ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻗﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﻘﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ LCD ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻀﻲء ﺣﺘﻰ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﻟﺜﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ 2 ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻀﻄﺮ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ PIN code ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻨﺎء 3 PIN ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ LCD ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﻟﺜﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء SIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺗﻘ...

Page 24: ...ﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ 8 ﺇﻟﻰ 4 ﻣﻦ PUK ﺭﻣﺰ SIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻊ PUK ﺭﻣﺰ ﻳﺮﻓﻖ ﻗﺪ ﻣﻨﻌﻪ ﺗﻢ PIN ﺭﻣﺰ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ PIN ﻣﻨﻊ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ PUK ﺭﻣﺰ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ ً ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺎ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻟﻢ ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ 8 ﺇﻟﻰ 4 ﻣﻦ PUK2 ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻌﻪ ﺗﻢ PUK2 ﺭﻣﺰ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ SIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ...

Page 25: ...ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ 1 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻟﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻋﻦ ﻃﻠﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻢ 2 ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ 3 ﺩﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻛﻮﺩ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺑﺎﺩﺋﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ 1 ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻛﻮﺩ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﻛﻮﺩ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻢ 2 ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ 3 ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻹ...

Page 26: ... ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ 41 ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻓﺘﺢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﻢ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺮﺩ 1 1 8 1 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﺈﻥ 41 ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ً ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﺪﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻟﺮﻓﺾ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ...

Page 27: ...ﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ T9 ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻭﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺄﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻛﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻗﺎﻣﻮﺱ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﻐﻄﻚ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﺝ ﺏ ﺃ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﻣﻦ ً ﺟﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﺌﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ً ﺃﺣﻴﺎﻧﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ABC ﻭﺿﻊ ﻳﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻉ ﺍ...

Page 28: ...ﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺑﻜﺘﺎﺑﺘﻬﺎ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻇﻠﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻣﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ Good ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Home ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﻭﺿﻊ ً ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻓﻘﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻓﻘﺪﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ABC T9 ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺛﻢ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ T9 ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻋﻦ T9 ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗ...

Page 29: ...ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺃﻱ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ 2 ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻤﺤﻮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺑﺮﺟﺎء 1 2 ﺙ ﺓ ﺕ ﺏ 3 ء ﺉ ﺅ ﻯ ﺁ ﺇ ﺃ ﺍ 4 ﺽ ﺹ ﺵ ﺱ 5 ﺯ ﺭ ﺫ ﺩ 6 ﺥ ﺡ ﺝ 7 ﻯ ﻭ ﻩ ﻥ 8 ﻡ ﻝ ﻙ ﻕ ﻑ 9 ﻍ ﻉ ﻅ ﻁ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ 0 ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ...

Page 30: ... 46 43 ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻔ...

Page 31: ...ﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻛﺘﻢ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻟﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻛﺘﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ً ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺍ ﺗﻈﻞ ﺃﻧﻚ ﺇﻻ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء DTMF ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ DTMF ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ DTMF ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ DTMF on ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻢ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻵﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺼ...

Page 32: ...ﻞ ﺇﺷﺮﺍﻙ ﻣﺆﺗﻤﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺗﻤﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺆﺗﻤﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺇﺷﺮﺍﻙ ﻣﺆﺗﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺗﻤﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺆﺗﻤﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺗﻤﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ...

Page 33: ... ﻋﻤﻞ ﺎ ً ﺃﻳﻀ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 50 ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ 3 35 ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ 1 ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ 1 ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ 1 ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ 2 ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ 2 ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ 3 GPRS ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ 3 ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ 4 ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ 4 ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ 5 ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺣﻈﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ 5 ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ 6 ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ 6 ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ 7 FDN ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ 7 ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ 8 ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ 4 43 ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻢ 2 ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ...

Page 34: ...ﺫﺝ 5 ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ 6 72 ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ 6 ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ 1 ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ 2 ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ 3 76 ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺎﺗﻲ 7 ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ 1 ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ 2 ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ 3 ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ 4 78 ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ 8 ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ 1 SIM ﺧﺪﻣﺔ 2 82 ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ 9 ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ 1 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ 2 ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ 3 ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ 4 ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ 5 ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ 6 GPRS 7 ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ 8 ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺷﺠﺮﺓ ...

Page 35: ...ﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﻕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻛﻞ ﻓﻮﻕ ً ﺓ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ...

Page 36: ... ﺭﻗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺎﺋﺘﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ 10 ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻚ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ Options ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻻﺕ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺟﻬﺔ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻅ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﻔﻆ ...

Page 37: ... ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺳﺠﻼﺕ ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺣﺪﺩﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺣﺬﻑ 3 1 1 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺻﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ 10 ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻚ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻋﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ Options ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ...

Page 39: ...ﻝ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ SIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ On ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ًﺎ ﻴ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺑﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺣﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﻃﻼﻉ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ Auto display 3 1 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ GPRS ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ GPRS ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ GPRS ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ً ﻣﺘﺼﻼ ﻗﻀﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺎ ً ﺃﻳﻀ ﻳ...

Page 40: ...ﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻛﻞ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻻ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺭﺩ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻻ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻻ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻞ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﺎﻛﺲ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻛﺲ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻛﻞ...

Page 41: ...ﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻻ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺣﻈﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻞ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﻈﺮ ﻛﻞ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺣﺼﻠﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺣﻈﺮ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺳﻴﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻳﺠﺐ ...

Page 42: ...ﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ PIN2 ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻻ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺘﻚ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ PIN2 ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ SIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻛﻞ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻻ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻟﻦ 8 1 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ 1 8 1 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﺮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﺮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻹ...

Page 43: ...ﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻟﻦ ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻇﺔ 6 8 1 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺑﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻌﻮﻥ ﺑﻬﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﺈﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻫ...

Page 44: ... ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ 1 ﻋﻨﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ 2 ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻋﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ 3 ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ Options ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻻﺕ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﺼﻴ...

Page 45: ...ﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻻﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺃﺭﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﺻﻴﺪ ﻓﻮﺍﺗﻴﺮ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺁﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺄﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ًﺎ ﻳ ﻳﺪﻭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ً ﺑﺪﻻ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻴﺰ...

Page 46: ...ﻴﻦ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﻮﻣﻲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ 5 1 2 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ SIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻻﺕ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ SIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ SIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎ...

Page 47: ...ﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺭﺉ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ SIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ Service dial number ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺪﺩ 1 ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ 2 ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ 3 2 2 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟ...

Page 48: ...ﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻭﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻣﺠﺪﻭﻻﻥ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺳﻴﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺣﺬﻑ 3 2 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﻣ...

Page 49: ...ﻴﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ 3 ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻬﺎﻡ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ 20 ﻭﺗﺪﻭﻳﻦ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺎ ً ﺣﺮﻓ 30 ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ Options ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﺇﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻡ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻬﺎﻡ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤ...

Page 50: ...ﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻟﻚ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﺭ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺣﺮﻓﺎ 30 ﻭ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ 20 ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﺨﺰﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﻛﻞ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺣﺬﻑ 2 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻢ ...

Page 51: ...ﺭﻗﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ 1 ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ 1 ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ Select ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ 2 ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ 9 ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ Favorite ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺑﻌﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ Options ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﻤﻜ...

Page 52: ...ﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺃﻱ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ 4 ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ Unit ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺣﺪﺩ 1 ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻗﺴﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ 2 ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺣﺪﺩ 3 ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻗﺴﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ 4 ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮ...

Page 53: ...ﺶ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ 1 ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ 2 ﺿﺒﻂ Set ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ...

Page 54: ...ﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺣﺬﻑ 7 3 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﺎﻛﺲ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺗﺤﺖ ﻓﺎﻛﺲ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻛﺲ ﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻛﺲ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻟﻠﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻔﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ IrDA ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ...

Page 55: ...ﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻫﻮ PC Sync ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻓﺄﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ PC Sync ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺷﻲء ﺃﻱ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ IrDA ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ PC SYNC ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء IrDA ﻣﻨﻔﺬ IrDA ﻣﻨﻔﺬ 3 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ...

Page 56: ...ﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ Windows XP ﺃﻭ 2000 ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻔﻘﺪ ُ ﺗ ﻗﺪ ﺇﺻﻼﺡ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻴﺐ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻫﻤﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻛﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﺑﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﻗﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ MP3 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺎ ً ﺧﺼﻮﺻ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻳﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻤ...

Page 57: ...ﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻛﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ PC Sync ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ 4 ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺎﺗﻲ 7 ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ 1 ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ 2 ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ Format disk 2 ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ 3 ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ OK ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺛﻢ ﻧﻌﻢ Yes ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ 4 ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ 5 ﺗﻘﻢ ﻻ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﻞ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍ...

Page 58: ...udio player ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﺎﻟﺢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ 20 ﻣﻦ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺎ ً ﻣﻠﻔ 20 ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ 4 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ v s ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ 6 ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎ...

Page 59: ...ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ Loop ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺮﺓ B A ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ Loop ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ B ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗ...

Page 60: ...ﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ 3 4 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ Java MIDlet ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ Sun Microsystems ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺟﺎﻓﺎ ﺗﻌﺪ MS ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺿﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ Netscape ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ Java Applet ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ُﻤﻜﻦ ﻤ ﺍﻟ WAP Internet Explorer ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺟﺎﻓﺎ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺟﺎﻓﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻛﻞ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎ...

Page 61: ... ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ًﺎ ﻣ ﺗﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻛﻞ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻓﺎﻟﺤﺮﺹ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺬﻭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﺳﺘ...

Page 62: ...ﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻛﻞ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺣﺬﻑ MMS ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻗﺪ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ 4 3 4 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﻮﻯ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ WAP ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺨﺰﻥ ُ ﺗ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻚ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ...

Page 63: ...ﻴﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺺ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ 29 ﺣﺘﻰ 26 ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻛﺘﺐ 1 ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ Options ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺑﻌﺪ 2 ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ 5 ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ Options ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺎ ً ﻻﺣﻘ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻣ...

Page 64: ... 2 1 5 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻌﺮﺽ ُ ﺗ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺗﻘﻮﻡ SIM ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ SIM ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ SIM ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ Options ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘ...

Page 65: ...ﻝ ﻛﻤﺴﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ Options ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﺴﻮﺩﺓ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ 5 1 5 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ SMS ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ X 400 ﻭ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺎﻛﺲ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ERMES ﻭ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟﺘﺴﻠﻴﻤﻬﻢ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻻﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻊ SMS ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨ...

Page 66: ...ﻭﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ 1 ﺗﻢ Done ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻧﺺ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ 2 ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ OK ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺛﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ 3 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺎ...

Page 67: ...ﻘﺎﺋ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﻮﺩﺓ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺘﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﻼﺹ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ ﻭﻧﻮﻋﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﻮﻗﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤ...

Page 68: ...ﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺮﺓ ًﺎ ﻴ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﻮﺩﺓ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺘﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﻼﺹ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺠﻤﻬ...

Page 69: ...ﻓﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ 5 2 5 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻼﺣﻴﺔ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ًﺎ ﻴ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻟﺘﺄﺟﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻔ...

Page 70: ...ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ً ﺓ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻌﺮﺽ ُ ﺗ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ 1 4 5 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ 2 4 5 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ 3 4 5 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺿﻴﻊ ﻭﺍﻻﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ Add new ﺣﺪﺩ ﺛﻢ ﺧﻴ...

Page 71: ... ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ SMS ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻟﺨﻤﺴﺔ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ MMS ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ 2 5 5 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧ...

Page 72: ... ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺑﻌﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺣﺬﻑ SMS ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ Attach ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺎ ً ﺃﻳﻀ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ 62 ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻧﻈﺮ MMS ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ 6 5 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ...

Page 73: ...ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺑﺎﺣﺚ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻜﻨﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻓﺘﺤﻬﺎ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ x1 ﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ...

Page 74: ...ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺘﻮﺳﻴﻂ ﻗﻢ 1 ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ 2 ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ Camera ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻼﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻛﺰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺑﻌﺪ 3 ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﺖ ﻗﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ OK ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ 96x96 ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ 6 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟ...

Page 75: ...ﻟﻰ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ Options ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻛﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ 65 ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ LCD ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ LCD ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﺿﺎﻓ...

Page 76: ...ﻛﺮﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ 300 ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻴﺠﺎ 1 ﺑﺴﻌﺔ ﻣﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻﺣﻆ ﻟﻜﻦ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺑﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻻ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ 300 ﻣﻦ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻟﻮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ 300 ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ 6 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ...

Page 77: ... ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ Options ﻫﺬﻩ ﻓﻲ ُﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻣ EMS ﺃﻭ MMS ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺇﺭﻓﺎﻗﻬﺎ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ Options ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ Options ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ MMS ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺭ...

Page 78: ...ﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ Options ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ 3 7 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ Halloween Fever ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ 60 ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ 4 7 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ USB ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘ...

Page 79: ...ﺸﻴﺮ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ 48 ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ Own number ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ URL ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺳﻴﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﻗ...

Page 80: ...ﻭﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺎ ً ﺃﻳﻀ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ Options ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ 1 ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ OK ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺛﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ New bookmark ﺍﺧﺘﺮ 2 ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ OK ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ URL ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ 3 ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻭ URL ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺣﺎﻓ...

Page 81: ...ﺕ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺑﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﻻ ﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ 4 1 8 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ WAP ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺗ...

Page 82: ... ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 8 1 8 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ 9 1 8 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ WAP ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ WAP ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻳﺘﻢ 2 8 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ SIM ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﻣﺜﻞ SIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﻛﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻭﺳﻴﺪﻋ...

Page 83: ...ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ 3 1 9 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ 4 1 9 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ُﻌﺪﺓ ﻤ ﺍﻟ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻏﻠﻖ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺑﺼﺮﻑ ﺎ ً ﺻﻮﺗ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ 5 1 9 ...

Page 84: ... ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺤﻴﺔ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ On ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺤﻴﺔ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻴﺔ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻴﺔ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ 3 2 9 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻻ ﺃﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﺙ 4 2 9 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ...

Page 85: ...ﻖ format 2 3 9 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺳﻨﺔ ﺷﻬﺮ ﻳﻮﻡ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺷﻬﺮ ﺳﻨﺔ ﺷﻬﺮ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺳﻨﺔ 3 3 9 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ Time format ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ 4 3 9 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ 24 ﺳﺎﻋﺔ 12 5 3 9 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ On ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ 6 3 9 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺟﺮﺱ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ On ﺑﺘ...

Page 86: ... ﻻ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺃﻱ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ PIN ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻳﺠﺐ PIN ﺭﻣﺰ ﻃﻠﺐ PIN code request ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ PIN ﺭﻣﺰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻳﺠﺐ PIN ﺭﻣﺰ ﻃﻠﺐ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻛﻞ ﻓﻲ PIN ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ً ﺓ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﺘﺼﻞ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ 2 5 9 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻨﻚ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﻣﺰ...

Page 87: ...0 ﺗﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ً ﺓ ﻋﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻠﻜﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻣﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ 1800 ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ GSM 900 1800 ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﻌﺎﻭﺩﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺛﻢ GSM 1900 ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﻨﻮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ 7 9 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ GPRS ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ GPRS ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ...

Page 88: ...ء ﺃﻭ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ GPRS ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺳﻴﺤﺎﻭﻝ ًﺎ ﻴ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ Automatic ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﻗﻤﺖ GPRS ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ 2 7 9 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ GPRS ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﻭ DNS ﻭ IP ﻭﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ APN ﻭ 8 9 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻹ...

Page 89: ...ﻮﻉ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺩﻱء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺱ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻗﺪ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﺘﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﻗﻢ ً ﺟﺬﺭﻳﺎ ً ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﺪ ﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺋﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺭﺩﻱء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺱ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻗﺪ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﺘﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﻗﻢ ً ﺟﺬﺭﻳﺎ ً ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﺪ ﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ LCD...

Page 90: ...ﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻗﺼﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺝ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺿﻌﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻻ ﺱ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺝ ﺑﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻷﺣﺪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻻ ﺱ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺗﺘﺼﻞ ﻫﻞ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ 3 ﻣﻦ ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻫﻞ ﺝ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺣﻈﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﻤﺖ ﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ PUK ﺃﻭ PIN ﺭﻣﺰ ﺃ...

Page 91: ...ﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺯﺭ ﻭﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻭﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻃﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ USB ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ MP3 ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺟﺎﻓﺎ ﻭﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭﺧﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ P...

Page 92: ...ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺻﻼﺣﻴﺔ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻗﺪ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ LG ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ً ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻟﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ُ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺎﺅﻻﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻛﻴﻠﻨﺎ ﺃﻭ ...

Page 93: ...92 F1200 ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ F1200 ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﺳﻢ GSM900 DCS 1800 PCS 1900 ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ 55 ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ 10 ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ...

Page 94: ... ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻌﻀﻰ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻯ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ F1200 ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻯ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ ...

Page 95: ...ﺧﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺸﻜﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻬﻤﯽ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺣﺎﻭی ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ً ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻟﻐﻮ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺻﻼﺣﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ...

Page 96: ...ی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎی ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ SAR ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺸﺎﺕ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﻩ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻝ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﺑﺎﻧﺪﻫﺎی ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺗﯽ ﺟﯽ ﺍﻝ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻉ ﻫﺎی ﮔﻮﺷﯽ SAR ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﺍﻣﻮﺍﺝ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﻫﺎ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻳﻮﻧﻴﺰﻩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺗﺸﻌﺸﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﯽ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﻤﻴﺴﻴﻮﻥ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﻪ SAR ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺪﻥ ﺑ...

Page 97: ...ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺁﺷﭙﺰی ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﻳﺎ ﺷﻮﻓﺎژ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﯽ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻧﻴﺎﻧﺪﺍﺯﻳﺪ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﯽ ﺷﻮﻙ ﺑﺎ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﺪ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻭﻳﻨﻴﻠﯽ ﺭﻭﻛﺶ ﻳﺎ ﻟﻔﺎﻑ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺪﻥ ﭘﻮﺷﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺧﺸﻚ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻘﻂ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺧﺎﻙ ﻭ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭﺩ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻭ ﺣﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺑﻠﻴﻂ...

Page 98: ... ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺰﺋﯽ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻻﺕ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺟﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻪ ﺍی ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﻭ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﻨﺪﺯﻓﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺒﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺏ ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﻛﻨﻴ...

Page 99: ...ﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﻭﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻛﺴﺐ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺭﻭی ﻫﻮﺍﭘﻴﻤﺎ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﻛﻮﺩﻛﺎﻥ ﺧﻔﮕﯽ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻧﮕﻪ ﻛﻮﺩﻛﺎﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺿﺮﻭﺭی ﻫﺎی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻴﺴﺮ ﺳﻠﻮﻟﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺿﺮﻭﺭی ﻫﺎی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺍﺗﻜﺎ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺿﺮﻭﺭی ﻫﺎی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﻤﯽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺸﻮﺭﺕ...

Page 100: ...ﺩ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺻﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻥ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺣﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻳﺎ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﻣﻨﻔﯽ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮی ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺭﻭی ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻡ ﻳﺎ ﻭ ﺳﺮﺩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺤﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ...

Page 101: ...ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ 19 ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﺼﺐ 21 ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺷﺎﺭژ 22 ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺟﺪﺍﻛﺮﺩﻥ 22 ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ 23 ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﻛﺪﻫﺎی 23 ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ 24 ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی 24 ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی 24 ﻣﺘﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ 29 ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ 29 ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ 30 ﻛﻨﻔﺮﺍﻧﺲ ﻳﺎ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی 32 ﻣﻨﻮ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﻰ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ 34 ﻫﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ...

Page 102: ...ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ 41 ٧ ١ ﻣﻨﻮ FDN ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﮔﻴﺮﻯ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻯ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ 41 ٨ ١ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ 43 ٢ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻥ 43 ١ ٢ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ 46 ٢ ٢ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ 48 ٣ ٢ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺯﻧﮕﺪﺍﺭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ 48 ۴ ٢ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ 49 ۵ ٢ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ 50 ٣ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎ 50 ١ ٣ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ 50 ٢ ٣ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ 51 ٣ ٣ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﺒﺪﻝ 51 ۴ ٣ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﺮﻧﻮﻣﺘﺮ 52 ۵ ٣ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺟﻬﺎﻧﯽ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ 52 ۶ ٣ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ 53 ٧ ٣ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﺎﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺷﻌﻪ ...

Page 103: ... ﻣﻨﻮ ﻫﺎ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ 63 ١ ۵ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﺘﻨﻰ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ 66 ٢ ۵ ﻣﻨﻮ MMS ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ 71 ٣ ۵ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺻﻮﺗﻰ ﻫﺎﻯ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ 71 ۴ ۵ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ 72 ۵ ۵ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﻟﮕﻮ 73 ۶ ۵ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ 74 ۶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ 74 ١ ۶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﻜﺲ 76 ٢ ۶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮔﺎﻟﺮﻯ 77 ٣ ۶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ 78 ٧ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ 78 ١ ٧ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ 79 ٢ ٧ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎ 79 ٣ ٧ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻯ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ 79 ۴ ٧ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺣﻤﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ...

Page 104: ...ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ 83 ٢ ٨ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ 84 ٩ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ 84 ١ ٩ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺻﺪﺍ 85 ٢ ٩ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ 86 ٣ ٩ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ 87 ۴ ٩ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻫﺎ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ 87 ۵ ٩ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ 88 ۶ ٩ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ 88 ٧ ٩ ﻣﻨﻮ GPRS 89 ٨ ٩ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ 90 ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻭ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ 92 ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ 94 ﻓﻨﯽ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ...

Page 105: ... ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻰ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﺩ ﻣﻰ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﻠﻰ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻃﻰ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻰ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻭ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﺎﻟﻰ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻫﻨﮕﻰ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻳﻜﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺟﻬﺖ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﺎﺯﻣﻰ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﻌﺪﻯ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩ...

Page 106: ...ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ۶ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﮔﻴﺮﻩ ۴ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ٨ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺳﻮﻛﺖ ٣ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻫﺎﻯ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ٢ F1200 ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻯ ﻫﺪﺳﺖ ﻓﻴﺶ ٢ ﻣﺰﺍﺣﻤﺖ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻭ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺪﺳﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻟﺬﺕ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻫﺪﺳﺖ ﻓﻴﺶ ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ١ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ٣ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻴﺰ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ IrDA ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ...

Page 107: ...١ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ٢ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ۶ ﭼﭗ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ۴ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﻓﻮﺭﻯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ۵ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ٩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ١٠ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ١٢ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ١١ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻯ ٧ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻦ ١۴ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻯ ١٣ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺸﯽ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻯ ٨ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ٣ F1200 ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻯ ...

Page 108: ... ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﻰ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻣﻰ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﺎ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺸﯽ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻯ ٨ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﻯ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﻰ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻣﻨﻮﻯ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﻯ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻣﻨﻮﻯ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﭗ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻯ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻰ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑ...

Page 110: ...ﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻨﻮﻯ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ WAP ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﻰ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ GPRS ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻝ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ...

Page 111: ... ﺟﻬﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻰ ﻭ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﺎﻟﻰ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭ MP3 ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻯ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ً ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﻬﺖ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﺎﺯﻣﻰ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ۵۵ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ F1200 ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ F1200 ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻯ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﻰ ﻗﺒﻠﻰ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻓﻌﻠﻰ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻯ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻃﻰ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﻮﻗﺘﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﻓ...

Page 112: ...ﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ١ ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﻭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻯ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ ﺁﺯﺍﺩﺳﺎﺯﻯ ﮔﻴﺮﻩ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﺺ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﻰ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ٢ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ ﺟﺎﻯ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻥ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻨﻰ ﻟﺒﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ...

Page 113: ... ﺭﺍ ﺁﻥ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻭ ﺣﻤﻞ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﺪ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺧﺮﺍﺷﻴﺪﮔﻰ ﺑﺎ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﻰ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻓﻠﺰﻯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﻯ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺐ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ۴ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻼﻳﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ ﻫﺎﻯ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ﻃﻼﻳﻰ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻯ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺭﺩﻳﻒ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ ﺟﺎﻯ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺟﺎﻯ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ...

Page 114: ...ﺎﻯ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻠﻮﻯ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﻯ ﭘﻴﻜﺎﻥ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺑﺮﻕ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻯ ٢ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ ﻭﻗﺘﻰ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ ﻭ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻰ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻜﺸﺪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺧﺎﻟﻰ ً ً ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺧﺮﺍﺏ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻏﻴﺮ...

Page 115: ...ﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻥ ﻭ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ١ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ LCD ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ٢ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ PIN ﻛﺪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ PIN ﻛﺪ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ٣ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ LCD ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺷﺎﺭژ ً ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺧﺎ...

Page 116: ...ﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ PIN ﻛﺪ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﺮﺍی PIN ﻛﺪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ PUK ﻛﺪ ﻛﺪ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺎﻧﯽ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻔﻘﻮﺩ PUK2 ﻛﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ PUK٢ ﻛﺪ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻛﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﻪ PUK٢ ﻛﺪ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﻔﻘﻮﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺭﻗﻤﯽ 8 ﺗﺎ 4 ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ ﻛﺪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺪﻩ ...

Page 117: ... ﻭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ١ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺟﻬﺘﺪﺍﺭ ﻫﺎی ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ٢ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ٣ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﯽ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﯽ ﺑﻴﻦ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻧﮕﻪ ﻭ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ١ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﯽ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﻛﺪﻫﺎی ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﻛﺪ ﻭ ﻛﺸﻮﺭ ﻛﺪ ٢ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ٣ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ...

Page 118: ...ﺎﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺑﺮﺍی ١ ۴١ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ١ ٨ ١ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻫﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ۴١ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﭘﺎﺳﺨﮕﻮﻳﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻫﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﺯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻛﻤﻬﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﭼﭗ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻛﻨﺎﺭی ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﺍﺯ ﻳﻜﯽ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻧﮕﻪ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﻬﺎی ﺳﺎ...

Page 119: ...ﺘﻦ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ٢ T9 ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ T9 ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﺭﺍ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻐﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻟﻐﺘﻨﺎﻣﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ً ﮔﺎﻫﺎ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻤﺘﺮی ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ABC ﻗﺪﻳﻤﯽ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺷﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﻴﻨﯽ ABC ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺑﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺪﻫﺎﻧﺪ ﺣﻚ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ...

Page 120: ...ﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻬﯽ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎی ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻏﻠﻂ ﻟﻐﺖ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺲ ﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﻟﻐﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺎی ﺩﮐﻤﻪ Good ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺘﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ Home ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ABC ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻥ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻟﻐﺖ ﺍﮔﺮ T9 ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ Option ﭼﭗ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ T9 ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻫﻤﭽﻨ...

Page 121: ...ﺩﻭﻡ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻳﻜﺒﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ٢ ﺷﻮﺩ ﭘﺎﻙ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻞ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻧﮕﻪ ﻭ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺫﻳﻞ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻔﺒﺎ ﻫﺎی ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﺍی 1 2 ﺙ ﺕ پ ﺏ 3 ء ﺉ ﺇ ﺅ ﺃ ﺁ ﺍ 4 ﺽ ﺹ ﺵ ﺱ 5 ژ ﺯ ﺭ ﺫ ﺩ 6 ﺥ ﺡ چ ﺝ 7 ی ﻭ ﻩ ﻥ 8 ﻡ ﻝ گ ﻙ ﻕ 9 ﻑ ﻍ ﻉ ﻅ ﻁ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ 0 ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻬﺎ ﺷﻴﻔﺖ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ...

Page 122: ...ﺩﺩ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ۴۶ ۴٣ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﻴﺴﺎﺯﺩ ﻣﻬﻴﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻧﯽ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﭼﭗ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻳﻚ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﺸﺮﻳﺢ ﺫﻳﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻬﺎی ﻭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ...

Page 123: ...ﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺻﺪﺍی ﻗﻄﻊ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻳﻚ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺩﺭ DTMF ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺗﻨﻬﺎی ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ DTMF ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﭼﭗ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻫ...

Page 124: ...ﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﭼﭗ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺟﺎﺭی ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﺑﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﮔﺮﻭﻫﯽ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮔﺮﻭﻫﯽ ﻛﻨﻔﺮﺍﻧﺲ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺟﻬﺘﺪﺍﺭ ﻫﺎی ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺗﺰ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﻨﺪ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﻔﺮﺍﻧﺴﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩی ﺍﺳﺎﻣﯽ ﺭﻭی ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻔﺮﺍﻧﺴﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻛﻨﻔﺮﺍﻧﺲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺼﻮ...

Page 125: ...ﺭ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎ ٣ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ٣۵ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ١ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ١ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺛﺒﺖ ١ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ٢ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ٢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﺒﺪﻝ ٣ GPRS ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ٣ ﮐﺮﻧﻮﻣﺘﺮ ۴ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ۴ ﺟﻬﺎﻧﯽ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ۵ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻧﺴﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ۵ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ ۶ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ۶ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﺎﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺷﻌﻪ ٧ FDN ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﮔﻴﺮﻯ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻯ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ٧ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ٨ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ۴ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ۴٣ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻥ ٢ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ١ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ١ ﺗﻘﻮﻳ...

Page 126: ... ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ٧۴ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ۶ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﻜﺲ ١ ﮔﺎﻟﺮی ٢ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ٣ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ٧٨ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ٧ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ١ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎ ٢ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩی ﻫﺎﻯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ٣ ﺣﻤﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ۴ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ٨ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ٨٠ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ١ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ٢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ٩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ٨۴ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﺍ ١ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ٢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ٣ ﻫﺎ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ۴ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ۵ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ۶ GPRS ٧ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ٨ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﻰ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ...

Page 127: ...ﻮﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻋﻰ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎﻯ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻰ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ً ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻰ ﺧﻂ ﻯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻓﻌﻠﻰ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻯ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﻌﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﺶ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻨﻮﻯ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﻰ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﭼﭗ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻫﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ...

Page 128: ...ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻣﻰ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻫﺎﻯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﺘﻨﻰ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻯ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻰ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﻡ...

Page 129: ...ﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﻰ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎﻯ ﺁﻣﺎﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﺎﻙ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺣﺬﻑ ٣ ١ ١ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻯ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎﻯ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺧﻴﺮ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻰ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ١٠ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻣﻰ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﺘﻨﻰ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻧ...

Page 130: ...ﻴﺮﻯ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎﻯ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﻰ ﻳﺎ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎﻯ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﺭﻯ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻰ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﻭ ﻗﺒﺾ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺗﺴﻮﻳﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ٢ ٢ ١ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻛﻠﻰ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻰ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻯ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻰ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ...

Page 131: ...ﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺍﻯ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻭﻗﺘﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮﻯ ﺩﺭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﺎﺯﺩ ﻣﻰ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻥ ٣ ١ ﻣﻨﻮ GPRS ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺯ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ GPRS ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ GPRS ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﺁﻧﻼﻳﻦ ﻣﺪﺕ ﭼﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ...

Page 132: ...ﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻭﻗﺘﻰ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺍﺷﻐﺎﻝ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺻﻮﺗﻰ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎﻯ ﭘﺎﺳﺨﮕﻮﻳﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﺳﺨﮕﻮﻳﯽ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺻﻮﺗﻰ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎﻯ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻭﻗﺘﻰ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺷﺮﻁ ﻭ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎ ﺍی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎﻯ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻯ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﻭ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﺑﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﺑﺮ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎﻯ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣ...

Page 133: ...ﺎﺭﺝ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻗﺘﻰ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻯ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎﻯ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﻭ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻰ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻧﺴﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻧﺴﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻟﻐﻮ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻰ ﺍﻧﺴﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻰ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ...

Page 134: ...ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺎ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ 2 ﭘﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ 2 ﭘﻴﻦ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻯ ﻛﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻧﻤﻰ ٨ ١ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ١ ٨ ١ ﻣﻨﻮ ﭘﺎﺳﺨﮕﻮﻳﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﺳﺨﮕﻮﻳﻰ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﻰ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺗﺎﺷﻮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﺎ ﺯﻧﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻭﻗﺘﻰ ﺗﺎﺷﻮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺎﺯﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ...

Page 135: ...ﻪ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ۶ ٨ ١ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩﻯ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻯ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻜﻰ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺍﭘﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻛﺴﺐ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻰ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎﻯ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻩ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻓﻬﺮ...

Page 136: ...ﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ١ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺣﺮﻑ ٢ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺲ ٣ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻫﺎﻯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻰ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻭ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ...

Page 137: ...ﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻜﻰ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﻬﻢ ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻬﺎﻯ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺻﻮﺗﻰ ﭘﺴﺖ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻗﺘﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻰ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺠﺎﻯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺳﺮﻯ ﻳﻚ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﻣﺠﺒﻮﺭ ً ﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺎ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻰ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺩﺳﺘﻰ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﻳ...

Page 138: ...ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﻰ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻯ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻯ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﺻﻰ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻀﻮ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻋﻀﻮ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻀﻮ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻋﻀﻮ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺟﻬﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ۵ ١ ٢ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻛﭙﻰ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻛﭙﻰ ﺑﺮﻋﻜﺲ ﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺎ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی...

Page 139: ...ﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﮔﻴﺮﻯ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻯ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺍﭘﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﻪ SDN ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﮔﻴﺮﻯ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﭘﺴﺖ ﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻯ ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺭﻯ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺻﻮﺗﻰ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﮔﻴﺮﻯ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻯ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ١ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻰ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻧﺎﻡ ٢ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻻ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺸﻰ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻯ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺟﻬﺖ ٣ ...

Page 140: ...ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ٣٠ ﺗﺎ ﻭ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﺭﺍﮐﺘﺮ ٣٠ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﺎﺯﻣﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻭ ﻋﺪﺩﻯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻯ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﭼﭗ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺸﻰ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻯ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺳﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻓﺮﺍ ﺭﻭﻳﺪﺍﺩ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﻳﺰﻯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺗ...

Page 141: ... ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ۴ ٢ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻭﻇﺎﻳﻔﻰ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﭘﻴﮕﻴﺮﻯ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻰ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﭼﭗ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻗﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ١ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺸﻰ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺲ ٢ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﭼﭗ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﺪﺩﻯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻯ ﺑﺎ ٣ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﮐﺎﺭﺍﮐﺘﺮ ٣٠ ﺗﺎ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ٢٠ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ...

Page 143: ...ﺘﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻫﺎﻯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻣﻨﻮﻯ ﻫﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻣﻨﻮﻯ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻣﻰ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﻨﻮﻯ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻣﻨﻮﻯ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﻣﻨﻮﻯ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻣﻨﻮﻯ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻳﺸﻪ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎﻯ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺣﺬﻑ ٢ ٣ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻮ...

Page 144: ...ﺖ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺸﻰ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ۴ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻯ ﭼﭗ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺸﻰ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻯ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ۵ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻰ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﺪﺩﻯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻯ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ۶ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻋﺸﺎﺭﻯ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ۴ ٣ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﺮﻧﻮﻣﺘﺮ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻞ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ۴ ﺗﺎ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎی ﻣﺪﺕ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺳﭙﺮی ﻣﺪﺕ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺛﺎ...

Page 145: ... ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ۶ ٣ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ٣٠ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ٣ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺟﺪﻳﺪی ﺻﺪﺍی ﻳﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﭼﭗ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺿﻮﺗﯽ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﺍی ١ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ٢ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﭼﭗ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺳﻴﺪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻗﺘﻴﻜﻪ ٣ ...

Page 146: ...ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﺑﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻭ ﭘﻴﻜﺮﺑﻨﺪﻯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ IrDA ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﺎﺩﻭﻥ ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ ﻣﻰ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﺎﺩﻭﻥ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺎ IrDA ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﻰ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ٣٠ ﺗﺎ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻰ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺴﺎﺯﻯ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻰ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎ...

Page 147: ...ﺑﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻯ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻛﺴﺐ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻰ ﻫﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻤﺎ IrDA ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻰ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﻭ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻰ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﻤﻰ ﺣﻤﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻰ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ٣ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎ ...

Page 148: ...٩٨ ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺣﻤﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻭ ﺭﻋﺪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻰ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﺑﻌﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮﻭﺩ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﺺ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺩﻗﺘﻰ ﺑﻰ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﺴﻴﺘﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻭ MP3 ﻫﺎﻯ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﻬﻢ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ً ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺑﺒﺮﺩ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﻜﻪ ً ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻧﺎﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ...

Page 149: ... ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺭﺳﻴﺪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻭﻗﺘﻴﻜﻪ ۶ ﺍﻳﻨﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ Exit ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﻭﻯ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻧﻤﻰ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﻰ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭﻯ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﺣﻤﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻗﺘﻰ ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻰ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺭﻭﻯ ١ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ USB S...

Page 150: ...ﺎﻡ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻨﺪﻯ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻧﻤﻰ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺣﻤﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﻭﻟﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺣﻤﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺧﺎﻟﻰ ﻓﻀﺎﻯ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻰ Removable ﺣﻤﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ۴ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ٧ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺑﻪ ١ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ disk ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻰ ﻛﺪ ٢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ Memory Status ٣ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ٣ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﻭﻯ ٣ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺣﻤﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺧﺎﻟﻰ ﻓﻀﺎﻯ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣ...

Page 151: ...ﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻄﺎ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﻣﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﺮﻣﻰ ﻗﺒﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻭ ﺷﺪﻩ Options Loop ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﻴﺼﺪﺍ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺯﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺳﻄﺢ ۶ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻃﺮﺡ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺳﺎﺯ ﻫﻤﺴﺎﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺁﻥ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﻫﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﻤﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﻳﮑﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ A B ۴ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ...

Page 152: ...ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻳﮑﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ B ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ A ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ً ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ ﺭﺍ B A ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻛﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺳﻴ...

Page 153: ...ﻃﻼﻉ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻟﺬﺕ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺯی ﺍﺯ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﻣﻨﻮی ﻳﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﻭی ٣ ۴ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩی ﻫﺎﻯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻭ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺯی Applet ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭﻳﮑﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ Sun Microsystems ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﻨﺎﻭﺭﻳﻰ ﺟﺎﻭﺍ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ MS ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺘﯽ ﮐﺎﻭﺷﮕﺮ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮﻫﺎی ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ Netscape ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺎﻭﺍ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺁﻥ WAP ﮐﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻨﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﯽ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺎﻭﺍ ﻣﻴﺪﻟ...

Page 154: ... ﻛﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻰ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﺟﺎﻭﺍ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺟﺎﻭﺍ ﻣﻨﻮﻯ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻳﺪ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻨﻮﻯ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻣﻰ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻰ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭﻯ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺟﺎﻭﺍﻯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﻮﻓﻖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﻯ...

Page 155: ...ﻰ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎﻯ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻯ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺸﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺍﭘﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﮐﺴﺐ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻰ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ WAP ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﺪ...

Page 156: ...ﻫﻤﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ١ ١ ۵ ﻣﻨﻮ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﮐﺎﺭﺍﮐﺘﺮ ٩١٨ ً ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻭ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ۶ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺘﻨﻰ ﻫﺎﻯ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ٢٩ ﺗﺎ ٢۶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻰ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ١ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻌﺪ ٢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻫﺎﻯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻤﺎﺭ...

Page 157: ...ﺮﻙ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ١۵ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻜﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎﻯ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻜﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺘﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎﻯ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺎﻳﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻣﻀﺎﻯ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺍﻣﻀﺎ ٢ ١ ۵ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍﻯ ﻭ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﭘﻴ...

Page 158: ...ﺍﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻰ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ٣ ١ ۵ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﻣﻮﻓﻖ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻭ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﻯ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍﻯ ﻭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻫﺎﻯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻫﺎ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﻠﻰ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﭘﻴ...

Page 159: ...ﻣﻰ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﮔﺮ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ SMS ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻤﺎ SMS ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ SMS ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻛﺴﺐ ﺟﻬﺖ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ GSM ﻳﺎ GPRS ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ...

Page 160: ... ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ٩ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻫﺎﻯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ۴ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻜﻰ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﭘﻴﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﻳﮏ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺫﺧﻴ...

Page 161: ...ﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﺮﭼﻨﺪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻨﺞ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ً ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﻳﮏ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻳﮏ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻦ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺭﺍ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ...

Page 162: ...ﺪ ﭼﭗ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﺮﭼﻨﺪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻨﺞ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ً ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﻳﮏ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻳﮏ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻦ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﻰ ...

Page 163: ...ﻪ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﯽ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻋﺪﺩی ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ۵ ٢ ۵ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻫﺎﻯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺮﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﻞ...

Page 164: ... ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﻫﺎﻯ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻣﺘﻨﻰ ﻫﺎﻯ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﻯ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﻰ ﺳﻬﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺭﻭﻫﺎ ﻫﺎ ﺗﺎﻛﺴﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﺗﺮﺍﻓﻴﻚ ﺍﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﻫﻮﺍ ﻭ ﺁﺏ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻰ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻫﺎ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺍﭘﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﮔﺸﻮﺩﻧﻰ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻳﻚ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻰ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺴﺘﻘ...

Page 165: ...ﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺍﻣﻀﺎ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ١ ۵ ۵ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﺘﻨﻰ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎﻯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻪ ً ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﻳﺮﻡ ﻛﺠﺎﻳﯽ ﺣﺎﻻ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﺭﺍﻫﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺿﺮﻭﺭی ﺧﻴﻠﻰ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺖ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻫﺎﻯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻰ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻯ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﺘﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨ...

Page 166: ... ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ٣ ۵ ۵ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﻣﻀﺎ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﭼﭗ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ١ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻜﻰ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﺑﺮ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻧﺎﻡ ٢ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﭼﭗ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ٣ ﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎﻯ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺍﻣﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻯ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻣﻀﺎ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻣﻀﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ...

Page 167: ... ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﺏ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ ﮔﺎﻟﺮﻯ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺷﺪﻧﺪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮔﺎﻟﺮﻯ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻭﻗﺘﻴﻜﻪ ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﻗﻰ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺎﺯﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺮ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﺎﺯﻣﻰ ﻓﺮﺽ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﻰ ﻭ ﺳﻨﺞ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ ﺑﺮ...

Page 168: ...ﻩ ﺍی ﻗﻬﻮﻩ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﺎﻳﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ Ļ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻰ ļ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ۵ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ٣ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺳﻨﺞ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ Ľ ﺗﺎﺑﺎﻥ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻰ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺳﻔﻴﺪﻯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ľ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺍﺑﺮﻯ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﻯ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﭼﭗ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻯ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ١ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻻ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻯ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ٢ ۶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ 2 1 0 1 2 ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ 96x96 640x480 320x240 128x160 ﺗﺼﻮی ﺩﻗﺖ x1 x2 x1 x2 x1 x2 x1 x2 ...

Page 169: ...ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ۶٧ ۶۶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ً ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ٩۶x٩۶ ﻋﻜﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻰ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻰ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ٢ ۶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮔﺎﻟﺮﻯ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﮔﺎﻟﺮﻯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻣﻨﻮﻯ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺎﻛﻨﻰ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻳﺎ...

Page 170: ...ﺎﺑﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﮔﺎﻟﺮﻯ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﻭ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﭼﭗ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻰ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻰ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺣﺬﻑ ٣ ۶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻧ...

Page 171: ...ﻮﻧﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ WAP EMS ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺘﻨﻰ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻫﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻫﺎﻯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻫﺎ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ MMS ﺑﺎ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ...

Page 172: ...ﺮﺩﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻳﻚ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻫﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ٣ ٧ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻯ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻟﻮﻭﻳﻦ ﺗﺐ ﻓﺮﺽ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺑﺎﺯﻯ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﻰ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻰ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻯ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ۶١ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ۴ ٧ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺣﻤﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﻳﻦ USB ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ...

Page 173: ...ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺘﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﺯﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ً ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻨﻮﻯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ۴۶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻭﺷﮕﺮ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍﻯ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻰ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺻﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺲ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻭﺷﮕﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻥ URL ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﻭﺏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﻰ ﺑ...

Page 174: ...ﺮﺍﻯ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ١ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ٢ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻫﺎﻯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭ URL ٣ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻣﻰ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻰ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻰ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻰ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻭ URL ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻳ...

Page 175: ...ﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﻰ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻰ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺻﻰ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻰ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﻯ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ۴ ١ ٨ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺸﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺍﭘﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﮐﺴﺐ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻓﺮﻋﻰ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎﻯ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻯ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻰ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﻰ ...

Page 176: ...ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻰ ﻫﺎﻯ ﮔﻮﺍﻫﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻰ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﮔﻮﺍﻫﻰ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﻰ ٨ ١ ٨ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺍﺻﻠﻰ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ٩ ١ ٨ ﻣﻨﻮ WAP ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻰ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ WAP ﻛﺎﻭﺷﮕﺮ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ٢ ٨ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﻬﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺯﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻧﻜﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻯ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻯ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻜﻰ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ...

Page 177: ... ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻻ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻯ ﺑﺸﻨﻮﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ٣ ١ ٩ ﻣﻨﻮ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻥ ﺻﺪﺍﻯ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻭ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ۴ ١ ٩ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﻭﻗﺘﻴﻜﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﻰ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﻳﺪ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻯ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺁﻳﺪ ...

Page 178: ... ٩ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻰ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﻳﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻯ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺁﻣﺪ ﺧﻮﺵ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺁﻣﺪ ﺧﻮﺵ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻰ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻣﺪ ﺧﻮﺵ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺁﻣﺪ ﺧﻮﺵ ٣ ٢ ٩ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺰﺋﻰ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻴﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻮﺭﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺭﺍ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﻮﺭﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻛﺮ...

Page 179: ...ﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﺎﻩ ﺭﻭﺯ YYYY MM DD ﺭﻭﺯ ﻣﺎﻩ ﺳﺎﻝ DD MM YYYY ﻣﺎﻩ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺳﺎﻝ MM DD YYYY ٣ ٣ ٩ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻣﻨﻮﻯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻓﻌﻠﻰ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ۴ ٣ ٩ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻪ ٢۴ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻪ ١٢ ۵ ٣ ٩ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺩﻭﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻃﻮﺭﻯ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺩﻭﮔ...

Page 180: ...ﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻤﺎ ﭘﻴﻦ ﻛﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺨﺼﻰ ﺩﺭﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭘﻴﻦ ﻛﺪ ﺩﺭﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻰ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻫﺎﻯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﻦ ﻛﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻰ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ً ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻭﻗﺘﻴﻜﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ٢ ۵ ٩ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻰ ﺩﺭﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻰ ﻛﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ...

Page 181: ...ﺮﺗﺰ ١٩٣٠ ١٩٩٠ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﮕﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ١٨٠٠ ﻳﺎ ٩٠٠ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﺍﺯ ً ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﺴﺘﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺁﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺭ GSM ٩٠٠ ١٨٠٠ ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ﺭﻭﻯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻰ ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ GSM ١٩٠٠ ﺟﻨﻮﺑﻰ ﺁﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎﻯ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ٧ ٩ ﻣﻨﻮ GPRS ﺭﺍ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﻨﺎﻭﺭﻳﻰ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﻰ ﺍﻯ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ GPRS ﻫﺎﻯ ...

Page 182: ...ﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ GPRS ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺖ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ GPRS ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻭ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ GPRS ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭﻯ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻌﻰ ﺍﻯ ﺩﻭﺭﻩ ٢ ٧ ٩ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻰ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺷﺶ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﻪ GPRS ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻰ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻪ DNS IP ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻰ APN ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻧﺎﻡ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺯﻳﺮ ٨ ٩ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤ...

Page 183: ...ﺎﻥ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺻﺒﺮ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ٢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻭ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻋﻮﺽ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻧﺸﺪ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﺍﻓﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻋﻮﺽ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺳﻌﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻮﺝ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻣﺤﻠﻬﺎی ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﺩ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻓﻴﻜﺲ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺲ ﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﺍﻓﻴﻚ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﻣﺤﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺝ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻣﺤﻠﻬﺎی ﺩﺭ ﭘ...

Page 184: ...ﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺻﻞ ﺑﺎﻃﺮﻳﻬﺎی ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻫﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﺣﺠﻢ ﻳﺎ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻧﻤﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻫﺎی ﻫﻴﭻ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻫﻬﺎی ﻛﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ً ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻫﻬﺎ ﻧﻤﻴﮕﻴﺮﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛ...

Page 185: ...ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻭ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻭ ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭﻓﻦ ﻫﻨﺪﺯﻓﺮی ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻭ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻦ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻯ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﻭ ﻫﺪﺳﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﭼﭗ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺪﺳﺖ ﻓﻴﺶ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻛﻴﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ USB ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭ MP3 ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺣﻤﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻯ ...

Page 186: ...ﻤﺎﻯ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﮔﺎﺭﺍﻧﺘﯽ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺟﯽ ﺍﻝ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻬﺎی ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ...

Page 187: ...94 F1200 ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻯ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ F1200 ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻧﺎﻡ GSM900 DCS 1800 PCS 1900 ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ 55C ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ 10C ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻓﻨﯽ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ...

Page 188: ...Some of contents in this manual may differ from your phone depending on the software of the phone or your service provider F1200 User Guide English ...

Page 189: ...munication technology This user guide contains important information on the use and operation of this phone Please read all the information carefully for optimal performance and to prevent any damage to or misuse of the phone Any changes or modifications not expressly approved in this user s guide could void your warranty for this equipment Introduction ...

Page 190: ...ate or SAR Tests for SAR are conducted using standardized method with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all used frequency bands While there may be differences between the SAR levels of various LG phone models they are all designed to meet the relevant guidelines for exposure to radio waves The SAR limit recommended by the International Commission on Non Ionizing Radia...

Page 191: ...as radiators or cookers Do not drop Do not subject this unit to mechanical vibration or shock The coating of the phone may be damaged if covered with wrap or vinyl wrapper Use dry cloth to clean the exterior of the unit Do not use solvent such as benzene thinner or alcohol Do not subject this unit to excessive smoke or dust Do not keep the phone next to credit cards or transport tickets it can aff...

Page 192: ...isturbed by mobile phones Minor interference may affect TVs radios PCs etc Road Safety Check the laws and regulations on the use of mobile phones in the areas when you drive Do not use a hand held phone while driving Give full attention to driving Use a hands free kit if available Pull off the road and park before making or answering a call if driving conditions so require RF energy may affect som...

Page 193: ...round without crew permission Children Keep the phone in a safe place out of children s reach It includes small parts which if detached may cause a choking hazard Emergency calls Emergency calls may not be available under all cellular networks Therefore you should never depend solely on the phone for emergency calls Check with your local service provider Battery information and care You do not nee...

Page 194: ...ed for a long time to maximize usability Do not expose the battery charger to direct sunlight or use it in high humidity such as the bathroom Do not leave the battery in hot or cold places this may deteriorate the battery performance Batteries shall be disposed in accordance with the local povisions The socket outlet used for the AC DC adaptor power supply unit shall be near the equipment and shal...

Page 195: ...battery pack 19 Charging the battery 21 Disconnecting the adapter 22 Turning your phone on and off 23 Access codes 23 Barring password 24 General functions 25 Making and answering calls 25 Entering text 27 Phonebook 30 In call menu 30 Multiparty or conference calls 32 Menu tree 34 Selecting functions and options 36 8 T a b l e o f C o n t e n t s ...

Page 196: ... waiting Menu 1 6 42 Fixed dial number FDN Menu 1 7 43 Settings Menu 1 8 43 Organiser Menu 2 45 Phonebook Menu 2 1 45 Scheduler Menu 2 2 49 Alarm clock Menu 2 3 50 To do Menu 2 4 50 Memo Menu 2 5 51 Tools Menu 3 52 Favourites Menu 3 1 52 Calculator Menu 3 2 53 Unit converter Menu 3 3 53 Stop watch Menu 3 4 54 World time Menu 3 5 54 Voice recorder Menu 3 6 54 Infrared Menu 3 7 55 9 ...

Page 197: ...messages MMS Menu 5 2 70 Voice messages Menu 5 3 74 Info services Menu 5 4 75 Templates Menu 5 5 76 Memory status Menu 5 6 77 Camera Menu 6 78 Take picture Menu 6 1 78 Gallery Menu 6 2 80 Memory status Menu 6 3 81 My stuff Menu 7 82 Images Menu 7 1 82 Sounds Menu 7 2 83 Applications Menu 7 3 83 Removable disk Menu 7 4 83 10 T a b l e o f C o n t e n t s ...

Page 198: ...nu 8 2 87 Settings Menu 9 88 Sound Menu 9 1 88 Display Menu 9 2 89 Date Time Menu 9 3 90 Languages Menu 9 4 91 Security Menu 9 5 91 Network Menu 9 6 92 GPRS Menu 9 7 92 Reset settings Menu 9 8 93 Q A 94 Accessories 96 Technical data 98 F1200 User Guide 11 ...

Page 199: ... current track Press and hold down this key until you find the spot you d like to listen to Press this key twice to activate the music player The playlist is displayed Note When there is no music in the playlist Playlist empty is popped up and goes back to standby mode Press once again to play the music on the playlist Moves the cursor to the next track during the playback Fast forwards the curren...

Page 200: ...mera key Press and hold down this key to activate the camera mode Also use this key to take a shot 4 IrDA port 7 Battery cover 4 Battery latch Press this button to remove the battery cover and battery pack 8 Charger connector Cable connector 6 Battery pack 5 Battery terminals 1 Holes for a carrying strap 3 SIM card socket 2 SIM card terminals F1200 features ...

Page 201: ...iece 2 Main screen 6 Send key 4 Left soft key 5 Music hot key 9 Right soft key 8 Navigation keys 10 Camera key 12 End Power key 11 Clear key 13 Alphanumeric keys 7 Special function keys 14 Microphone 3 Confirm Internet key F1200 features ...

Page 202: ...ng press of this key enters a pause 8 Navigation keys Use to scroll through menus and move the cursor You can also use these keys for quick access to the following functions Up navigation key A shortcut key to the Favorites menu Down navigation key A shortcut key to search the phonebook Left navigation key A shortcut key to the Sound menu Right navigation key A shortcut key to the message inbox 10...

Page 203: ...ipt of a text message Indicates the receipt of a voice message Indicates the receipt of a multimedia message Indicates that Call divert function is activated Indicates the receipt of an e mail message Indicates that the manner mode is activated Indicates the Ring is set as the call alert type Indicates the Vibrate is set as the call alert type Indicates the Silent is set as the call alert type Ind...

Page 204: ...escription Indicates that you have a schedule for the selected day in the schedule menu Indicates that the phone is accessing the WAP Indicates that you are using GPRS Indicates that you entered the security page F1200 features ...

Page 205: ...the music Key features n Note If there is no MP3 file loaded on the phone Playlist empty will be popped up and go back to standby mode To load music files onto your phone please see Transferring music files to the F1200 on page 57 F1200 features Short press Skips to the previous track Long press Rewinds the current track during the playback Short press Plays Pauses the music Short press Skips to t...

Page 206: ...ver Press the battery release latch and slide the battery cover toward the bottom of the phone And remove the battery cover n Notice Removing the battery from the phone when the power is on may cause the phone to malfunction 2 Remove the battery Hold the bottom edge of the battery and lift the battery from the battery compartment Getting started ...

Page 207: ...l it in the reverse direction n Note The metal contact of the SIM card can be easily damaged by scratches Pay special attention to the SIM card while handling Follow the instructions supplied with the SIM card 4 Install the battery Insert the battery aligning the gold contacts on the battery pack with the battery terminals gold contacts in the battery compartment Push down the top of the battery u...

Page 208: ...til the latch clicks Charging the battery Only use the mains adapter supplied with your phone 1 With the battery in position on the phone connect the lead from the mains adapter to the bottom of the phone Make sure that the arrow on the lead connector is facing towards the front of the phone Getting started ...

Page 209: ...power outlet Disconnect the adapter from the phone by pressing the grey tabs on both sides of the connector and pull the connector out n Note Use of unauthorised accessories could damage your phone and invalidate your warranty Do not force the connector as this may damage the phone and or the mains adapter Ensure the battery is fully charged before first using the phone Do not remove the battery o...

Page 210: ...The access codes except PUK and PUK2 codes can be changed by using the Change codes feature Menu 9 5 3 See page 91 PIN code 4 to 8 digits The PIN Personal Identification Number code protects your SIM card against unauthorised use The PIN code is usually supplied with the SIM card When the PIN code request is set to Enable your phone will request the PIN code every time the phone is switched on Whe...

Page 211: ...e 4 to 8 digits The security code protects the unauthorised use of your phone The default security code is set to 0000 and the security code is required to delete all phone entries and to activate the Reset settings menu Also the security code is required to enable or disable the phone lock function to prevent unauthorised use of the phone The security code default setting can be modified from the...

Page 212: ...by mode press the send key and the latest incoming outgoing and missed phone numbers will be displayed 2 Select the desired number by using the up down navigation key 3 Press Making an international call 1 Press and hold the key for the international prefix The character automatically selects the international access code 2 Enter the country code area code and the phone number 3 Press Ending a cal...

Page 213: ...s the answer mode See page 43 Menu 1 8 1 n Note If Any key has been set as the answer mode see page 43 any key press will answer a call except for the or the right soft key To reject an incoming call press and hold one of the side keys on the left side of the phone without opening the phone You can answer a call while using the Phonebook or other menu features 2 To end the call close the phone or ...

Page 214: ...e current text input mode in the lower right corner of the LCD screen T9 mode This mode lets you enter words with only one keystroke per letter Each key on the keypad has more than one letter The T9 mode automatically compares your keystrokes with an internal dictionary to determine the correct word thus requiring far fewer keystrokes than the traditional ABC mode This is sometimes known as predic...

Page 215: ...word options n Example Press to type Good Press Down navigation key to type Home If the desired word is missing from the word choice list add it using the ABC mode You can select the language of the T9 mode Press the left soft key Options then select T9 languages Select the desired language of T9 mode You can also turn off the T9 mode by selecting T9 off The default setting on the phone is T9 enab...

Page 216: ...rs press the key Press and hold down the key to clear the whole display n Note Refer to the table below for more information on the characters available using the alphanumeric keys Key Characters in the order display Upper case Lower case 1 1 A B C 2 a b c 2 D E F 3 d e f 3 G H I 4 g h i 4 J K L 5 j k l 5 M N O 6 m n o 6 P Q R S 7 p q r s 7 T U V 8 t u v 8 W X Y Z 9 w x y z 9 Space key 0 Long pres...

Page 217: ...details In call menu Your phone provides a number of control functions that you can use during a call To access these functions during a call press the left soft key Options During a call The menu displayed on the handset screen during a call is different to the default main menu displayed when in standby mode and the options are described below Making a second call Network dependent You can get a...

Page 218: ...e current call and answer the waiting call by selecting left soft key and then End Answer Rejecting an incoming call You can reject an incoming call without answering by simply pressing the key During a call you can reject an incoming call by pressing the left soft key Menu key and selecting the Conference Reject or by pressing the Muting the microphone You can mute the microphone during a call by...

Page 219: ...are in control of the multiparty call and only you can add callers to the multiparty call Making a second call You can make a second call while currently on a call Enter the second number and press the key When the second call is connected the first call is automatically placed on hold You can swap between calls by pressing the left soft key then selecting Swap Setting up a conference call Place o...

Page 220: ...ng a conference call To have a private call with one caller from a conference call display the number of the caller you wish to talk to on the screen then press the left soft key Select the Conference Private to put all the other callers on hold Ending a conference call To end a conference call press the key You can also end a conference call by selecting End call after pressing the left soft key ...

Page 221: ...pressing the corresponding number key of desired menu after pressing the left soft key Menu 1 Call manager see page 37 3 Tools see page 52 1 Call register 1 Favourites 2 Call charges 2 Calculator 3 GPRS information 3 Unit converter 4 Call divert 4 Stop watch 5 Call barring service 5 World time 6 Call waiting 6 Voice recorder 7 Fixed dial number FDN 7 Infrared 8 Settings 2 Organiser see page 45 4 M...

Page 222: ...plates 6 Memory status 6 Camera see page 78 1 Take picture 2 Gallery 3 Memory status 7 My stuff see page 82 1 Images 2 Sounds 3 Applications 4 Removable disk 8 Service see page 84 1 Internet 2 SIM service 9 Settings see page 88 1 Sound 2 Display 3 Date Time 4 Languages 5 Security 6 Network 7 GPRS 8 Reset settings Menu Tree ...

Page 223: ...d Each menu and sub menu lets you view and alter the settings of a particular function The roles of the soft keys vary according to the current context the label on the bottom line of the screen just above each key indicates its current role Press the right soft key to activate the corresponding action Press the left soft key to access the available menu Selecting functions and options ...

Page 224: ...selecting a phone number you can make a call to the number by pressing the send key And using the left soft key Options the following options are available Write text message You can send a text message to this number Write multimedia message You can send a multimedia message to this number Edit Edits the phonebook entry Save Shown if the name is not saved in the phonebook Saves the number creatin...

Page 225: ...e call log from the list View details Displays the call information Delete all Select this to clear up the received call logs Dialled calls Menu 1 1 3 This option lets you view the last 10 outgoing calls called or attempted After selecting a phone number you can make a call to the number by pressing the send key And using the left soft key Options the following options are available Write text mes...

Page 226: ...of the incoming calls Dialled Calls Length of the outgoing calls All calls Total length of all calls made or received calls since the timer was last reset n Notice The actual time invoiced for calls by your service provider may vary depending on network features rounding off for billing etc Call costs Menu 1 2 2 This network service allows you to check the last call cost and the total call cost Th...

Page 227: ...y This network service allows you to see automatically the cost of your last call If you select On in Auto display menu you can see the cost of the last call when the call is released GPRS information Menu 1 3 You can check the amount of data transferred over the network through the GPRS information option In addition you can also view how much time you are online GPRS stands for General Packet Ra...

Page 228: ...ply Diverts voice calls which you do not answer r If out of reach Diverts voice calls when the phone is switched off or out of coverage t All data calls Diverts to a number with a PC connection unconditionally y All fax calls Diverts to a number with a fax connection unconditionally Each option has the following menu Activate Activates the corresponding service To voice mail Forwards to message ce...

Page 229: ...vice area Cancel all barrings All call barring settings are deactivated calls can be made and received normally Change password Use this to set and change the call barring password obtained from your service provider using this option You must enter the current password before you can specify a new one Once you have entered a new password you are asked to confirm it by entering it again n Note To ...

Page 230: ...bers n Note Not all SIM cards have a PIN2 If your SIM card does not this menu option is not displayed Settings Menu 1 8 Answer mode Menu 1 8 1 Select the desired mode to answer a call Flip open When the phone rings you can answer a call simply by opening the folder Any key When the phone rings you can answer a call by pressing any key except the key and the right soft key Only send key You can ans...

Page 231: ...not subscribed to this network service Closed user group Menu 1 8 6 This is a network service that specifies the group of people who you can call and who can call you For more information contact your network operator or service provider If a group index is specified it is used for all outgoing calls If no group index is specified the network will use the preferential index A specific index is sto...

Page 232: ...Select Search 2 Enter the start of the name that you wish to find 3 After finding the desired name you can make a call to the number by pressing the send key Or press the left key Options to use the following options View details To view details of the selected name Edit Edits the name number the listing group and photo Delete Deletes the phonebook entry Write text message Use this to write a text...

Page 233: ... name and a number select the caller group and attach a photo image Depends on the SIM Adding new entries into the phone memory You can enter a name numbers E mail address and memo select the caller group and attach a photo image n Tip Pause feature When you call automated systems such as voice mail or credit billing numbers you often have to enter a series of numbers Instead of entering these num...

Page 234: ...age each group Press the left soft key Options The following submenus will be displayed Member list Displays the member list in the group Group ring tone Select the ring tone to be used when you receive a call from a person in the group Group icon Select the graphic icon to be displayed when you receive a call from a person in the group Add member Select this to add a member to the group Delete me...

Page 235: ...set the phone to search by name or number when you search the phonebook If you select Variable the phone will ask how to search when you search the phonebook Information Menu 2 1 8 Check memory You can check the current memory status of the SIM card and phone memory Own number SIM dependent Use this to display your phone number in the SIM card Service dial number SIM dependent Use this to view the...

Page 236: ...ne is switched off 5 Press the left soft key Save or the OK key After a schedule is entered on a date the date is shown in a different colour and appears on the right bottom of the screen This function reminds you of your schedule The phone will sound an alarm tone if you set the phone to do so The following options are available View Shows the shedule Edit Use this to edit the schedule Delete Use...

Page 237: ... Alarm on off Select On using the left right navigation key To deactivate the alarm function select Off 2 Alarm time Enter the alarm time using the numeric keys 3 Repetition Select the desired one from Once Daily Weekly and Monthly using the left right navigation key 4 Alarm melody Select the desired alarm melody using the left right navigation key 5 Press the left soft key Set or the OK key When ...

Page 238: ...ich have been done Delete all Clears up the to do list Memo Menu 2 5 You can write edit and delete a memo 1 Scroll to highlight Memo 2 Press the left soft key Add 3 After keying in the memo press the left soft key Options The following options are available Save Saves the memo T9 languages Select the T9 language to use in the memo Exit editor Allows you to exit from the memo editor After a memo is...

Page 239: ... soft key Add 2 Select the menu you wish to add by pressing the left soft key Select The menu is added in the Favorite menu with the pop up message Activated n Note You can add up to 9 menus After making up the Favorite menu in each favorite menu the following options are available by pressing the left soft key Options Select Selects the menu Change You can change the favorite menu with the anothe...

Page 240: ...t from one unit to another There are 4 types that can be converted into units Length Surface Weight and Volume 1 Select one of four unit types by pressing the left soft key Unit 2 Move to the Current unit section by pressing the down navigation key 3 Select the unit you want to convert using the left right navigation keys 4 Move to the Convert unit section by pressing the down navigation key 5 Sel...

Page 241: ...using the left right navigation keys The screen shows the city name current date and time To select the time zone in which you are located proceed as follows 1 Select the city corresponding to your time zone by pressing the left right navigation keys one or more times The local date and time are displayed 2 If you want to change the time display in standby mode to the selected time press the left ...

Page 242: ...oice memo Delete all Deletes all voice memos Infrared Menu 3 7 This feature allows you to send or receive data fax through the infrared port To use an infrared connection Install the modem driver for receiving or sending the data fax Install the network dial up software supplied by your network provider or fax application program for a fax call on your PC Configure and activate an IrDA compliant i...

Page 243: ...der n Note PC Sync is a program for data exchange between PC and the phone by the USB data cable Therefore if you want to use this function you need the accessory kit For more information you can use the PC Sync Help file on the CD With this IrDA feature you can transfer anything you want such as phonebook entries messages pictures etc While using the removable disk feature you cannot use the PC s...

Page 244: ...u can use the phone as a removable disk if the operating system is Windows 98SE Windows 2000 or Windows XP n Note Because of the small dimension of the speaker in some cases the audio could be distorted especially at maximum volume and when there are lots of bass sounds Therefore we recommend you to use the stereo headset in order to appreciate the high quality of your music Multimedia Menu 4 Wind...

Page 245: ...lick 1 Data transfer 4 Connect the phone and the computer with the data cable supplied in the sales package 5 Double click the Removable Disk in My Computer 6 When you have finished using the phone memory click Exit and take the following steps n Caution Before you remove the cable it is necessary that you click Exit Or the integrity of transferred data is not guaranteed n Note When you are using ...

Page 246: ...ected to the PC with the data cable although you can format the disk the stability of the removable disk operation is not guaranteed Checking the free space of the removable disk 1 Select Menu 7 My Stuff 4 Removable disk in sequence 2 Enter the security code 3 Click 3 Memory Status 4 You can check the free space of the removable disk n Note F1200 User Guide 59 With the removable disk feature you c...

Page 247: ...alid file is included in the playlist an error message will be popped up and go back to the prior screen Running time Status of the music controller Progressive bar Player skin Equalizer setting value File name with the file extension Volume level 6 volume levels including mute Multimedia Menu 4 Repeat Loop Play all Repeat all Play one Repeat one A B Options Loop ...

Page 248: ...hone in order Play one Plays the current track and stops playing Repeat one Keeps playing the current track You can use the loop feature with the right soft key Loop Press the right soft key Loop to set the beginning point A of the loop And press the right soft key A B again to set the ending point B F1200 User Guide 61 Volum Up Press this key to start the playback Press this key to pause Short pr...

Page 249: ...detail You can check the file name size length and date Delete all Clears out the playlist Settings Menu 4 1 3 Player skin You can select the desired player skin on the main screen Flip setting Select whether the playback will continue or stop when you open close the phone Memory status Menu 4 1 4 You can check the current memory status of the phone Games Menu 4 2 You can enjoy a game on the phone...

Page 250: ...ion From the network prior to download you can view all detailed file descriptions from the JAD file n Warning Only J2ME Java 2 Micro Edition based programs will run in a phone environment The J2SE Java 2 Standard Edition based programs will only run in a PC environment Applications Menu 4 3 1 This menu displays the list of Java programs downloaded using the WAP All previous downloaded programs ca...

Page 251: ...s deleted All bookmarks can be deleted completely from the bookmark list screen Deleted bookmark cannot be restored so caution is required when deleting bookmarks Add new New bookmark is added The same order used during Edit bookmark applies to Add new bookmark Select the Add new option from the bookmark menu or when no bookmark exists then the Add new can be selected from the bookmark list screen...

Page 252: ...dd a new access point Delete Deletes the selected access point from the list Delete all Deletes all the access points n Note The changes using these options may affect the MMS function Information Menu 4 3 4 The downloaded programs using the WAP are stored in the phone memory There is a maximum memory capacity in a phone and once you exceed this memory you will not be able to store any more progra...

Page 253: ...d SMS messages will be received provided sufficient space is available Write message Menu 5 1 1 You can write and edit text messages up to 6 pages approximately 918 characters 1 Key in your message For details on how to enter text refer to page 27 through 30 Entering Text 2 After you complete the message press the left soft key Options to select required option The following options are available ...

Page 254: ... text messages that contain pictures known as Picture messages Several preset pictures are available in the phone and they can be replaced with new ones received from other sources Animation Attaching an animation in a message can be done through EMS Enhanced Messaging Service You can select any of 15 animations in the phone Sound If available you can attach a sound available for a short message T...

Page 255: ...IM message or just message Each received message has the following options available Press the left soft key Options Reply Replies to the received message Forward Forwards a received message to other recipients Return call Calls the sender s phone Extract Extracts a picture sound text web page or email address from the message These will be saved in My folder Phonebook or bookmarks Delete Deletes ...

Page 256: ...s Menu 5 1 5 This menu lets you set up the default SMS information Message types Sets the default message type Text Voice Fax Paging X 400 E mail and ERMES The network can convert the messages into the selected format Validity period Sets the length of time for which your text messages will be saved at the SMS center while attempts are made to deliver them to the recipient Possible values are 1 ho...

Page 257: ...Menu 5 2 A multimedia message can contain text images and or sound clips This feature can be used only if it is supported by your network operator or service provider Only the devices that offer compatible multimedia message or e mail features can receive and send multimedia messages Write Menu 5 2 1 1 Key in the text message Using the right soft key you can input symbols numbers and emoticons or ...

Page 258: ...e format Select where to align the image Add slide Adds a slide before of after the current slide Remove slide Deletes the selected slide Inbox Menu 5 2 2 You will be alerted when you have received messages They will be saved in the Inbox You can identify each message by icons For details see the icon description below If the phone has No space for messages you can make space by deleting messages ...

Page 259: ...plays information about received messages Sender s address Subject only for Multimedia message Message date time Message type Message size Reply Replies to the sender Reply all Replies to all senders Delete message Deletes the current message Forward Forwards the selected message to other recipients Outbox Menu 5 2 3 Use this to see sent messages For each sent message you can see the delivery stat...

Page 260: ...ng this menu you can preset up to five multimedia messages that you use most frequently This menu shows the preset multimedia message list The following options are available Send Select this to send the multimedia message This phone supports multiple numbers and e mail addresses Preview Displays the multimedia message you wish to send Save You can save the multimedia message in draft or as a temp...

Page 261: ...her information Voice messages Menu 5 3 This menu provides you with a quick way of accessing your voice mailbox if provided by your network Before using this feature you must enter the voice server number obtained from your network operator When a new voice message is received the symbol will be displayed on the screen Please check with your network provider for details of their service in order t...

Page 262: ...by mode the following options are available when viewing info service messages Receive Menu 5 4 1 Use this to enable or disable the reception of broadcast messages Inbox Menu 5 4 2 The list of received broadcast messages can be searched and the contents viewed Topics Menu 5 4 3 Dependent to network and subscription To create new topics press the left soft key Options then select Add new If you alr...

Page 263: ... you send messages Text messages Menu 5 5 1 The followings are pre defined text templates Please call me back I m late I will be there at Where are you now I m on the way Top urgent Please contact I love you The following options are available Edit Use this to edit the selected template Delete Deletes the selected template message from the text template list Send text message Use this to send the ...

Page 264: ...lighted slide Signature Menu 5 5 3 1 Press the left soft key Add 2 Key in the name mobile phone number office number Fax number and E mail address 3 Press the left soft key Save After creating the signature template you can access the following menus by pressing the left soft key Options Edit Use this to edit the signature Delete Use this to delete the signature Send text message Use this to send ...

Page 265: ...u 6 1 Press the Menu key and select Camera Take picture Or press the camera hot key or longer than 2 seconds in standby mode You can see the viewfinder n Note You can go to the Gallery by pressing the left soft key when pictures are stored in the Gallery Before shooting you can set the following values Each setting value is remembered even after you close the camera module and reopen it But the ti...

Page 266: ...te The maximum zoom scale depends on the resolution as follows 5 Tone Colour Sepia Black and white 6 Brightness 2 1 0 1 2 7 Timer Off 3 sec 5 sec 8 White balance Auto Daylight Incandescent Cloudy Flourescent 1 Center the desired option menu using the left right navigation keys 2 Select the desired value with the up down navigation keys Resolution Zoom scale 640x480 x1 x2 320x240 x1 x2 128x160 x1 x...

Page 267: ...electing For further information regarding multimedia message writing refer to page 70 71 After taking a picture in 96x96 phonebook you can directly save the image in the phonebook by selecting n Note This feature links only the phonebook in the phone memory Gallery Menu 6 2 Press the Menu key and select Camera Gallery All the still images taken in the Take picture menu are stored in this menu You...

Page 268: ... To pause resume the slide show press the left soft key To stop the slide show and go back to Gallery press the right soft key Rename You can change the name of the selected image View details You can check the title resolution size and date and time of the selected image Delete all Deletes all the images in your phone Memory status Menu 6 3 Press the Menu key and select Camera Memory status You c...

Page 269: ...ded Downloaded WAP EMS pictures or animations are stored in this folder You can view them send a text message or a multimedia message with them or set them as a wallpaper after pressing the left soft key Options Photos You can access the following options after pressing the left soft key Options View To view the selected photo Send multimedia message To send the photo with MMS Set as wallpaper You...

Page 270: ...re stored in the folder You can set them as a ring tone view details of them or delete them after pressing the left soft key Options Applications Menu 7 3 Default games Halloween Fever Downloaded Accesses to the downloaded applications For more details see page 63 Removable disk Menu 7 4 Select this menu to use the removable disk feature using the USB data cable You need to enter the security code...

Page 271: ...o open your Internet account To use the Web Browser you must indicate your phone number via the Own number menu option See page 48 for further details To launch the browser in standby mode press and hold down the key Once connected the homepage is displayed The content depends on the service provider You can access any website page by entering its URL address To exit the browser at any time press ...

Page 272: ...arks in each folder To create a bookmark 1 Press the left soft key Options 2 Select New bookmark and press the OK key 3 Enter the desired URL and title and press the OK key After creating bookmarks the following options are available Connect Connects to the selected bookmark View You can view the URL of the selected bookmark New bookmark Select this to create a new bookmark New folder Select this ...

Page 273: ...he information of received push messages Load Connects to a specific site using the information in the received push message Delete Deletes the selected push message Receive You can choose whether or not you wish to receive push messages Access point Menu 8 1 4 For more information consult your network operator Each access point has submenus as follows Activate Activates the selected access point ...

Page 274: ...7 A list of the available certificates is shown Reset profiles Menu 8 1 8 You can reset profiles to return to original settings WAP information Menu 8 1 9 The WAP browser version is displayed SIM service Menu 8 2 Your service provider can offer special application through SIM card such as home banking stock market etc If you are registered for one of these services the service name will appear at ...

Page 275: ...vel Scroll through the list using up down navigation keys You can hear the desired tone prior to making a selection Message tone Menu 9 1 3 Select the alert tone for message receipt and the volume level Effect tone Menu 9 1 4 Select the desired effect tone When you press keys or open close the phone the phone emits the effect tone you set in this menu n Note The effect tone sounds regardless of th...

Page 276: ...2 2 Wallpaper Select the wallpaper which will be displayed on the front screen Greeting note To enter a greeting note select On And input a greeting note using the keypad The greeting note will be displayed in standby mode Backlight Menu 9 2 3 Use this to select whether or not the phone uses the backlight A small increase in standby talk time can be achieved by turning the backlight off Menu colou...

Page 277: ...t Menu 9 3 2 YYYY MM DD year month day DD MM YYYY day month year MM DD YYYY month day year Set time Menu 9 3 3 Use this to enter the current time You can choose the time format via the Time format menu option Time format Menu 9 3 4 24 hours 12 hours Dual clock Menu 9 3 5 You can activate the phone to run dual time clocks After selecting On select the desired dual time zone Beep every hour Menu 9 3...

Page 278: ...se your phone without your approval n Note Before disabling the PIN code request feature you must enter your PIN The following options are available Enable You must enter the PIN each time the phone is switched on Disable The phone connects directly to the network when you switch it on Phone lock Menu 9 5 2 You can lock your phone Select the desired phone lock option To change the phone lock optio...

Page 279: ...r networks usually use 900 MHz or 1800 MHz frequencies This phone is factory reset to the GSM 900 1800 band To use the phone in the USA or South America select GSM 1900 Next you must turn the phone off then on in order to enable the selected band GPRS Menu 9 7 GPRS General Packet Radio Service is a technology that allows mobile phones to be used for sending and receiving data over the mobile netwo...

Page 280: ... action that needs it The GPRS connection is closed after it is no longer required by any application n Note If there is no GPRS coverage and you have chosen Automatic the phone will periodically try to establish a connection External device Menu 9 7 2 When you use Internet via GPRS by using external device you can set the following six profiles Rename APN IP address DNS User ID and Password Reset...

Page 281: ... before turning it back on If there is no change relocate to another area and check again Q Connection is poor or is not audible in certain areas A In certain areas signal strength can vary dramatically Try moving to a different location Heavy network traffic may affect the ability to connect or the stability of the call Q Connection is poor even when established A In certain areas signal strength...

Page 282: ...uires replacement Only use authorised replacement parts Q Usage time of battery becomes shorter A If the battery time is short it may be due to the user environment or large volume of calls or weak signals Q No number is dialled when you recall a phonebook entry A Check that the numbers have been saved correctly by using the phonebook Search feature Resave them if necessary Q You cannot be contact...

Page 283: ...r microphone and music player controller combo Stereo headset Controller Answer End button music player control volume control Hold button and microphone After connecting the headset and the controller plug the end of controller into the headset jack on the right side of the phone Data cable kit Connects your phone to a PC USB data cable Removable disk To download the MP3 to the phone PC Sync To d...

Page 284: ...ote Always use genuine LG accessories Failure to do this may invalidate your warranty Accessories may be different in different regions please check with our regional service company or agent for further enquiries Accessories ...

Page 285: ...F1200 User Guide 98 General Product name F1200 System GSM900 DCS 1800 PCS 1900 Ambient Temperatures Max 55 C Min 10 C Technical data ...

Page 286: ......

Page 287: ...Memo ...

Page 288: ...101 Memo ...

Search results

Summary of Contents for F1200

Reviews:

LG F1200, User Manual, Page: 15 / 288

Search results

Summary of Contents for F1200

Reviews: